25001 products

SE Series Standard Cylinder

ISO15552 Standard Cylinder - SE Series

  • Product Features
  • Specifications
  • Stroke
  • Product Ordering Code

Product Features

  • ISO15552, VDMA24562 standard certified.
  • Piston seal adopts two Y-shape one-way seal structure, which features compact dimensions and grease storage function.
  • Square aluminum tube, no tie rod, good corrosion resistance.
  • Cylinder buffer adjustment is smooth and steady.
  • Various specifications of cylinders and mounting accessories are available for customers to choose from.

Specifications

Bore Size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Action Double Acting
Fluid Air (filtered 40μm or better)
Mounting Type SE: Basic, FA, FB, CA, CB, CR, LB, TC, FTC, TCM1, TCM2
SED, SEJ: Basic, FA, LB, TC, FTC, TCM1, TCM2
Operating Pressure 0.15~1.0MPa (22~145psi) (1.5~10.0bar)
Proof Pressure 1.5MPa (215psi) (15bar)
Temperature °C -20~70
Speed range mm/s 30~800 30~500
Stroke Tolerance 0~250 +1.0/0, 251~1000 +1.5/0, 1001~1500 +2.0/0
Cushion Type Adjustable Cushion
Port Size [Note 1] PT1/8 PT1/4 PT3/8 PT1/2
Note:
[1] PT thread, G thread are optional. For sensors, please refer to the relevant catalog pages.

Stroke Specifications

Bore (mm) Standard Stroke (mm) Max. Stroke Max. Allowable Stroke
32 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1000 1800
40 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 1200 1800
50 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1800
63 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
80 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
100 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
125 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
Note: Please contact the company for other special strokes.

Product Ordering Code

Example: SE 80 x 50 S LB

No. Category Description / Code
① Model SE: Standard Double Acting
SED: Double Shaft Double Acting
SEJ: Adjustable Stroke Double Acting
② Bore Size 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125
③ Rod Material Blank: Carbon Steel (Standard)
A: SUS420J2
B: SUS304
C: SUS316
④ Stroke Refer to Stroke table
⑤ Adjustable Stroke Only for SEJ series (e.g., 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100)
⑥ Magnet Blank: No Magnet
S: With Magnet
⑦ Mounting [Note 1] Blank: Standard
LB: Axial Foot
FA: Front Flange
FB: Rear Flange
CA: Single Clevis
CB: Double Clevis
CR: Clevis with pin
TC: Central Trunnion
FTC: Front Trunnion
⑧ Seal Material Blank: TPU (Standard)
H: Viton (Heat resistant)
N: NBR
⑨ Thread Blank: PT Thread
G: G Thread
Note 1: For details on accessories, please refer to pages P20~22. CR attachment is used with CB.
  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX996STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX996STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX996STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 996 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 996 996 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX996STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 996 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3759.96 g (3.75996 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 996 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1138 mm = 142 + 996; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1090 mm = 94 + 996 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1141 mm = 142 + 996 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2137 mm = 142 + 2 × 996 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1138 mm = 142 + 996 C+stroke 1090 mm = 94 + 996 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $472.24

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX1000STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX1000STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX1000STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 1000 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 1000 1000 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX1000STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 1000 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3773 g (3.773 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 1000 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1142 mm = 142 + 1000; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1094 mm = 94 + 1000 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1145 mm = 142 + 1000 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2145 mm = 142 + 2 × 1000 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1142 mm = 142 + 1000 C+stroke 1094 mm = 94 + 1000 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $473.47

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX999STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX999STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX999STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 999 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 999 999 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX999STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 999 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3769.74 g (3.76974 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 999 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1141 mm = 142 + 999; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1093 mm = 94 + 999 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1144 mm = 142 + 999 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2143 mm = 142 + 2 × 999 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1141 mm = 142 + 999 C+stroke 1093 mm = 94 + 999 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $473.20

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX987STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX987STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX987STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 987 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 987 987 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX987STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 987 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3730.62 g (3.73062 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 987 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1129 mm = 142 + 987; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1081 mm = 94 + 987 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1132 mm = 142 + 987 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2119 mm = 142 + 2 × 987 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1129 mm = 142 + 987 C+stroke 1081 mm = 94 + 987 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $469.42

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX990STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX990STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX990STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 990 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 990 990 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX990STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 990 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3740.4 g (3.7404 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 990 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1132 mm = 142 + 990; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1084 mm = 94 + 990 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1135 mm = 142 + 990 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2125 mm = 142 + 2 × 990 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1132 mm = 142 + 990 C+stroke 1084 mm = 94 + 990 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $470.35

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX997STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX997STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX997STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 997 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 997 997 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX997STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 997 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3763.22 g (3.76322 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 997 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1139 mm = 142 + 997; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1091 mm = 94 + 997 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1142 mm = 142 + 997 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2139 mm = 142 + 2 × 997 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1139 mm = 142 + 997 C+stroke 1091 mm = 94 + 997 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $472.51

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX993STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX993STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX993STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 993 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 993 993 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX993STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 993 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3750.18 g (3.75018 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 993 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1135 mm = 142 + 993; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1087 mm = 94 + 993 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1138 mm = 142 + 993 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2131 mm = 142 + 2 × 993 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1135 mm = 142 + 993 C+stroke 1087 mm = 94 + 993 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $471.31

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX994STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX994STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX994STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 994 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 994 994 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX994STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 994 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3753.44 g (3.75344 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 994 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1136 mm = 142 + 994; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1088 mm = 94 + 994 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1139 mm = 142 + 994 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2133 mm = 142 + 2 × 994 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1136 mm = 142 + 994 C+stroke 1088 mm = 94 + 994 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $471.55

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX995STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX995STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX995STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 995 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 995 995 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX995STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 995 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3756.7 g (3.7567 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 995 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1137 mm = 142 + 995; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1089 mm = 94 + 995 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1140 mm = 142 + 995 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2135 mm = 142 + 2 × 995 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1137 mm = 142 + 995 C+stroke 1089 mm = 94 + 995 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $471.83

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX998STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX998STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX998STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 998 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 998 998 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX998STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 998 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3766.48 g (3.76648 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 998 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1140 mm = 142 + 998; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1092 mm = 94 + 998 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1143 mm = 142 + 998 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2141 mm = 142 + 2 × 998 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1140 mm = 142 + 998 C+stroke 1092 mm = 94 + 998 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $472.79

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX980STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX980STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX980STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 980 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 980 980 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX980STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 980 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3707.8 g (3.7078 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 980 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1122 mm = 142 + 980; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1074 mm = 94 + 980 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1125 mm = 142 + 980 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2105 mm = 142 + 2 × 980 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1122 mm = 142 + 980 C+stroke 1074 mm = 94 + 980 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $467.25

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX984STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX984STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX984STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 984 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 984 984 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX984STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 984 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3720.84 g (3.72084 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 984 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1126 mm = 142 + 984; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1078 mm = 94 + 984 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1129 mm = 142 + 984 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2113 mm = 142 + 2 × 984 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1126 mm = 142 + 984 C+stroke 1078 mm = 94 + 984 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $468.46

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX979STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX979STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX979STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 979 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 979 979 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX979STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 979 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3704.54 g (3.70454 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 979 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1121 mm = 142 + 979; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1073 mm = 94 + 979 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1124 mm = 142 + 979 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2103 mm = 142 + 2 × 979 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1121 mm = 142 + 979 C+stroke 1073 mm = 94 + 979 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $466.98

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX991STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX991STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX991STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 991 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 991 991 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX991STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 991 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3743.66 g (3.74366 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 991 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1133 mm = 142 + 991; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1085 mm = 94 + 991 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1136 mm = 142 + 991 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2127 mm = 142 + 2 × 991 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1133 mm = 142 + 991 C+stroke 1085 mm = 94 + 991 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $470.62

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX992STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX992STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX992STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 992 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 992 992 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX992STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 992 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3746.92 g (3.74692 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 992 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1134 mm = 142 + 992; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1086 mm = 94 + 992 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1137 mm = 142 + 992 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2129 mm = 142 + 2 × 992 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1134 mm = 142 + 992 C+stroke 1086 mm = 94 + 992 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $471.03

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX986STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX986STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX986STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 986 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 986 986 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX986STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 986 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3727.36 g (3.72736 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 986 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1128 mm = 142 + 986; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1080 mm = 94 + 986 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1131 mm = 142 + 986 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2117 mm = 142 + 2 × 986 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1128 mm = 142 + 986 C+stroke 1080 mm = 94 + 986 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $469.14

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX981STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX981STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX981STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 981 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 981 981 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX981STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 981 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3711.06 g (3.71106 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 981 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1123 mm = 142 + 981; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1075 mm = 94 + 981 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1126 mm = 142 + 981 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2107 mm = 142 + 2 × 981 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1123 mm = 142 + 981 C+stroke 1075 mm = 94 + 981 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $467.50

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX988STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX988STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX988STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 988 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 988 988 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX988STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 988 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3733.88 g (3.73388 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 988 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1130 mm = 142 + 988; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1082 mm = 94 + 988 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1133 mm = 142 + 988 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2121 mm = 142 + 2 × 988 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1130 mm = 142 + 988 C+stroke 1082 mm = 94 + 988 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $469.66

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX975STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX975STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX975STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 975 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 975 975 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX975STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 975 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3691.5 g (3.6915 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 975 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1117 mm = 142 + 975; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1069 mm = 94 + 975 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1120 mm = 142 + 975 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2095 mm = 142 + 2 × 975 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1117 mm = 142 + 975 C+stroke 1069 mm = 94 + 975 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $465.75

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX982STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX982STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX982STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 982 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 982 982 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX982STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 982 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3714.32 g (3.71432 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 982 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1124 mm = 142 + 982; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1076 mm = 94 + 982 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1127 mm = 142 + 982 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2109 mm = 142 + 2 × 982 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1124 mm = 142 + 982 C+stroke 1076 mm = 94 + 982 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $467.91

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX989STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX989STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX989STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 989 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 989 989 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX989STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 989 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3737.14 g (3.73714 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 989 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1131 mm = 142 + 989; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1083 mm = 94 + 989 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1134 mm = 142 + 989 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2123 mm = 142 + 2 × 989 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1131 mm = 142 + 989 C+stroke 1083 mm = 94 + 989 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $470.07

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX985STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX985STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX985STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 985 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 985 985 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX985STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 985 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3724.1 g (3.7241 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 985 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1127 mm = 142 + 985; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1079 mm = 94 + 985 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1130 mm = 142 + 985 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2115 mm = 142 + 2 × 985 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1127 mm = 142 + 985 C+stroke 1079 mm = 94 + 985 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $468.87

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX966STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX966STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX966STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 966 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 966 966 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX966STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 966 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3662.16 g (3.66216 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 966 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1108 mm = 142 + 966; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1060 mm = 94 + 966 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1111 mm = 142 + 966 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2077 mm = 142 + 2 × 966 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1108 mm = 142 + 966 C+stroke 1060 mm = 94 + 966 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $462.92

  • Airtac SE: Double Acting Standard Air Cylinder - SE32CX970STCNG

    Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX970STCNG

    Specifications: SE32CX970STCNG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 970 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, NBR seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 970 970 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket N NBR (nitrile rubber); basic seal references are not the N bill of materials G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX970STCNG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 970 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option NBR; confirm individual seal materials Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3675.2 g (3.6752 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 970 mm × 3.26 g/mm, using the basic SE32 catalog formula as a dimensional reference estimate. No N-seal or rod-material mass correction is specified. This is not a measured or packed shipping weight. Mounting-part masses are not catalogued and are excluded. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1112 mm = 142 + 970; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1064 mm = 94 + 970 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1115 mm = 142 + 970 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2085 mm = 142 + 2 × 970 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 1112 mm = 142 + 970 C+stroke 1064 mm = 94 + 970 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU (basic reference) 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU (basic reference) 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR (basic reference) 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR (basic reference) 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU (basic reference) 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

    $464.13


You have seen 24 out of 25001 products

Footer image

© 2026 Airtac, Powered by Shopify

  • US (USD $) US (USD $)
  • Ach Direct Debit
  • Amazon
  • American Express
  • Apple Pay
  • Bizum
  • Diners Club
  • Discover
  • Google Pay
  • Mastercard
  • MB WAY
  • PayPal
  • Satispay
  • Shop Pay
  • USDC
  • Visa